Keyboard Part Number List
Notice 2023-11-02
The Keyboard Part Number Database search engine is currently being overhauled and a live preview is available. Please refer to the Keyboard Part Number Database FAQ to see the new ways you can refine searches for this database.
133 keyboards found/on record...
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01195500 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00610300 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2018 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language The original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=8219f25daa279225 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02290300 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00986500 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2287 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazilian Portuguese |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02289400 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41J6912 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
41J6913 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=0811766ddef08889 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
10J0902 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
65Y4680 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
65Y4684 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M8 50-Key RPOS LCD Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2011 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=9c18cd9a12b71bca |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01200600 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00611800 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2254 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431221 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7431724 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
7431725 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2014 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20230501152439/https://www.ebay.com/itm/266238701654 Web: https://www.reddit.com/r/keyboards/comments/p22f7b/looking_for_help_identifying_ibm_keyboard_from/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8790 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS MSR Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6949 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6959 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Litho Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92F6330 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
92F6319 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6300 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M8 50-Key RPOS LCD Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Maxi Switch, XAC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
49 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$550 USD in 1993 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Made for the IBM 4694 POS System and later reused with the SurePOS 700 Series |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 4694 POS Terminal Model 001 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-150) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8783 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7431184 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
50Y7034 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS LCD Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M8-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Retail Store Solutions |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2013 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Has additional part number 7431136 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2013-ME8-67 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01199000 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00610800 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2282 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431206 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41J7250 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
41J7260 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6300 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M8 50-Key RPOS LCD Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2006 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2006-8CR-50 Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=32afda3ce435960d |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
00DN121 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
00DN161 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2014 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
133 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=9906b2ee93bf7d60 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6947 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
86H1075 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2000 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB or Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to 12V PoweredUSB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2000-9CR-116 ASK: SNKB-M2000-9CR-116-A |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41J8019 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
41J8021 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3323 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M11 RPOS Modifiable Layout Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2003 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
2010-11-10 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
133 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size matrix |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with keycap accessory kits 13H7691 and 13H7692 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2006-11K-133 Doc: IBM Guide to Features - SurePOS 700 Models x84 & xx3 (#1R1003844-7x3-x84) [source: dokumen.tips] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
14J0696 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8785 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02285800 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembled at factory model, MFI number 3AA02284200 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02286000 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00986000 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2150 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
133 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02284400 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
13G2130 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3124 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XAC, XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2001 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$625 USD in 2001 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2006-9ME-116 Doc: IBM 4694 Point-of-Sale Systems - New Models Give You Greater Speed and Capacities (#101-276) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01200800 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00612000 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2252 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431223 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02286500 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M7-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to PS/2 mini-DIN or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembled at factory model, MFI number 3AA02284900 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02286100 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00986100 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2151 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02284500 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02286200 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00986200 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2152 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian-French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02284600 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92F6275 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
93F1925 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3202 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$625 USD in 1993 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Made for the IBM 4693 POS System, 4694 POS System and SurePOS 700 Series |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1996-9CR-117 Doc: IBM 4694 POS Terminal Model 001 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-150) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02285400 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00985800 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2283 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02283800 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02285600 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembled at factory model, MFI number 3AA02284000, US, LA and EMEA only |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02290500 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00986700 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2293 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to PS/2 mini-DIN or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02289600 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02285500 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00985900 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2285 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02283900 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
00DN207 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
00DN236 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M7-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2016 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
White straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to PS/2 mini-DIN or White straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=e2924fc643be03d1 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6963 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8784 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazilian Portuguese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6955 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Litho Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02285700 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembled at factory model, MFI number 3AA0228410, US, LA and EMEA only |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
14J0601 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01199100 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00610900 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2292 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazilian Portuguese |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431207 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
14J0695 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
93Y1231 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
65Y4641 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1350 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2011 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
133 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
SMU part number 44T4143 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2011-MEC-133 Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
44D1890 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
41J7256 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M8 50-Key RPOS LCD Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=1461d7ec5255de1c |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01198800 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00610600 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2286 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431204 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
39X8738 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
39X8738 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M8 50-Key RPOS LCD Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2009 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=350b1d5ad5814856 Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20230613150502/https://www.posrg.ca/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/products.pdf.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01200700 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00611900 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2251 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431222 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8792 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS MSR Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02286700 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00986400 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2241 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS LCD Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M8-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to PS/2 mini-DIN or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02285100 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02286600 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M7-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to PS/2 mini-DIN or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembled at factory model, MFI number 3AA02285000 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8781 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
10J0903 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02286300 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
133 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembled at factory model, MFI number 3AA02284700 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01201000 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00612200 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2253 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431225 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8787 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS MSR Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6965 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8791 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS MSR Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazilian Portuguese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02290800 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00987000 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2154 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazilian Portuguese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02289900 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01203000 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS LCD Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M8-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to PS/2 mini-DIN or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembled at factory model, MFI number 3AA02289000 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
13G2127 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XAC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2004 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8786 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS MSR Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
133 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02290600 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00986800 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2295 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02289700 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8788 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS MSR Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
93Y1223 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
93Y1203 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Retail Store Solutions |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2011 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2011-MAN-117 Doc: Toshiba Guide to Features - SurePOS 700 Models 4900-xx5 (#1R1003844-xx5) [source: manualzz] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6961 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92F6290 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3323 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M11 RPOS Modifiable Layout Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could terminals, PCs or laptops. |
IBM 4694 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4800 SurePOS 700 Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch, XAC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
133 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size matrix |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$645 USD in 1993 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 4694 POS Terminal Model 001 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-150) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02291000 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00987200 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2156 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02290100 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92F6272 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3206 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could terminals, PCs or laptops. |
IBM 4693 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4694 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4800 SurePOS 700 Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$625 USD in 1993 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 4694 POS Terminal Model 001 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-150) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41J6958 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
41J6959 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=86ce26fb770819e9 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92F6278 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3200 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could terminals, PCs or laptops. |
IBM 4693 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4694 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4800 SurePOS 700 Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazilian/Portuguese |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$625 USD in 1993 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 4694 POS Terminal Model 001 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-150) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
86H1066 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2000 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
DE ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2000-9CR-117 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01202800 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00613000 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2240 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS LCD Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M8-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to PS/2 mini-DIN or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431235 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
93Y1233 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
65Y4643 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2012 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2012-MEC-134 ASK: SNKB-M2012-MEC-134-A |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92F6320 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
93F1918 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3320 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M7 50-Key RPOS MSR Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could terminals, PCs or laptops. |
IBM 4694 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4800 SurePOS 700 Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch, XAC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$390 USD in 1993 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2004-7CR-50 Doc: IBM 4694 POS Terminal Model 001 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-150) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
65Y4045 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
65Y4091 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M7-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Retail Store Solutions |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2010 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=5918f81954e2a18a |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
10J0793 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Litho Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
10J0904 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
44D4035 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
44D4011 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 4613 96-Key POS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Retail Store Solutions |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
96 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Ortholinear |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2012-MEO-96 Doc: IBM SurePOS 100 Express System Hardware Announcement (#108-362) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02286400 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00986300 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2271 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M7-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to PS/2 mini-DIN or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02284800 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92F6271 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
93F1921 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3324 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could terminals, PCs or laptops. |
IBM 4693 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4694 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4800 SurePOS 700 Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$625 USD in 1993 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 4694 POS Terminal Model 001 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-150) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
86H1059 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3870 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2002 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM SurePOS 750 Models Enhanced Product Announcement (#AG02-0015) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01201200 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00612400 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2257 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkey |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431227 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6943 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41J7247 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
41J7257 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M7-1 50-Key RPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2007 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220729220004/https://produto.mercadolivre.com.br/MLB-1929010107-teclado-de-pdv-ibm-m7-1-_JM |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
86H1086 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M7-1 50-Key RPOS Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could terminals, PCs or laptops. |
IBM 4800 SurePOS 700 Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2000 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
2005-07-01 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware withdrawal: IBM Point of Sale product part numbers from the SAP-HVEC ordering process (#905-147) [source: IBM] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=18ccd619c2da10eb |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7431822 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
7431826 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M8 50-Key RPOS LCD Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2014 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=c9ee33e1d8176b35 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
86H1082 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
86H1082 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M7-1 50-Key RPOS Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could terminals, PCs or laptops. |
IBM 4800 SurePOS 700 Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2005 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
2005-07-01 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware withdrawal: IBM Point of Sale product part numbers from the SAP-HVEC ordering process (#905-147) [source: IBM] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=e1c9abcd765627b8 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
14J0694 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
40N6377 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 4820 32-Key POS Keypad |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
31 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2010-MES-32 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8782 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01198700 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00610500 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2284 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431203 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01198500 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00610300 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2280 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431201 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
93Y1232 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
65Y4642 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1350 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2012 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02286800 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS LCD Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M8-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to PS/2 mini-DIN or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembled at factory model, MFI number 3AA02285200 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
65Y4044 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
65Y4094 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS LCD Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M8-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Retail Store Solutions |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2011 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=40ac990a6b7461ef |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6945 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01201800 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00612800 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2270 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M7-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to PS/2 mini-DIN or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431233 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
44D1860 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
44D1861 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Retail Store Solutions |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2008-MEC-134 Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220508165334/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/312568372578?nordt=true&orig_cvip=true |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92F6310 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
60G4138 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3315 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M7-1 50-Key RPOS Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could terminals, PCs or laptops. |
IBM 4694 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4800 SurePOS 700 Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch, XAC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$300 USD in 1993 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 4694 POS Terminal Model 001 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-150) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
65Y4047 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
65Y4095 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M7-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Retail Store Solutions |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2011 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Has additional part number 44T4058 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2011-ME7-67 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
44D1891 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
41J7255 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M8 50-Key RPOS LCD Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=f1aec988973c4a37 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92F6273 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3201 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could terminals, PCs or laptops. |
IBM 4693 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4694 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4800 SurePOS 700 Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian/French |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$625 USD in 1993 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 4694 POS Terminal Model 001 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-150) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
10J0795 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Litho Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
86H1074 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3845 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2002 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM SurePOS 750 Models Enhanced Product Announcement (#AG02-0015) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01201100 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00612300 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2255 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazilian Portuguese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431226 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
00DN181 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
00DN210 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2014 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220406140201/https://www.neweggbusiness.com/product/product.aspx?item=9siv0wgdbt3195 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6951 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Litho Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02290900 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00987100 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2155 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02290000 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01201700 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
133 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembled at factory model, MFI number 3AA02288900 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41J7248 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3320 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M7 50-Key RPOS MSR Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2006 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2006-7CR-49 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
10J0905 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
65Y4677 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
65Y4681 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M8 50-Key RPOS LCD Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2011 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=cf8dd6ec332add34 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6953 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Litho Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01200500 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00611700 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2250 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
133 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431220 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01198900 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00610700 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2288 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431205 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02290700 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00986900 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2153 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkey |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02289800 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8780 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8789 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS MSR Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6967 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02290400 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00986600 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2289 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02289700 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
00DN136 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
00DN174 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" 67-Key MPOS LCD Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M8-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2016 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to PS/2 mini-DIN or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=da02ef944844de6d |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6957 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Litho Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
54P8779 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" CANPOS Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2003 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
133 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS pointer (Synaptics TouchStyk FSC pointing stick) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
86H1067 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
86H1067 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M11 RPOS Modifiable Layout Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could terminals, PCs or laptops. |
IBM 4800 SurePOS 700 Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2003 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
2005-07-01 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
133 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size matrix |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Hardware withdrawal: IBM Point of Sale product part numbers from the SAP-HVEC ordering process (#905-147) [source: IBM] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=e0922494767c769d |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41J7243 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
41J7253 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M7 50-Key RPOS MSR Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
Silk-screened legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 4x1 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2010-7CR-50 Web: https://www.posbarcodeparts.com/ibm-pos-41j7243-41j7253-50keys-keyboard/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01198600 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00610400 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2290 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431202 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
10J0794 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Litho Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
7431818 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
7431830 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3320 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M7 50-Key RPOS MSR Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2012 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with lasered legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Storm Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2014-7CR-49 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
93Y1131 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
65Y4071 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Retail Store Solutions |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2011 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
133 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
SMU part number 44T4142 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=15979a5a7f07cabc |
| CreditsCredits A reserved special acknowledgement to anyone who has helped me with research through social media, email or via the P/N submission form for this keyboard part number. |
CoolPenguin1#5714 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
10J0796 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Litho Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41K6969 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" PS/2 ANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
XSZ |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2008 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Point of Sale Options and I/O Devices Service Guide DRAFT (#GC30-9737-01) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA01200900 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00612100 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2256 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MCANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Iron Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
134 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 7431224 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02285300 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
3AC00985700 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2281 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
MFI number 3AA02283700 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
3AA02285900 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M-e" MANPOS Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M9-e |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Toshiba TEC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
2020 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 or USB HID |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to dual mini-DIN PS/2 or Black straightened-style detachable 6x2 IDC to Type A USB cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
POS Glide Pad & pointer/two-button Varatouch & touchpad module |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembled at factory model, MFI number 3AA02284300 |